2008 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{ CAUTION:
Read this owner manual from beginning to end to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Notices are also used in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can adjust
the seat forward or rearward with the bar located
under the front of the seat cushion.
Power Seats
Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where
you want it and release the bar. Try to move the
seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked
in place.
Seat Height Adjuster
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster,
it is located on the outboard side of the seat. See Manual
seat, move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height. To lower the seat, move the lever
downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,
Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.
page 1-5.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
If your vehicle has this
feature, the handle is
located on the inboard
side of the seatback.
See Manual Seats
on page 1-2 for more
information.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbar support.
Turn the handle forward to increase lumbar support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side
more information.
On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are
located on the center console. To operate the heated
seats the engine must be running.
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the
heated seatback.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn on the heated seat and seatback.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights above
the button will show the level of heat selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one for low.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
You may need to adjust the lumbar support whenever
you change your seating position.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is
cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
When the key is inserted into the ignition and the ignition
is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turn
the heated seat feature back on, press the desired
button.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s
door panel, and are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat and outside mirrors.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
enter your vehicle with the remote recall memory feature
on causes automatic seat and mirror adjustment. There is
no adjustment when the position has not been changed
by another seating position or the easy exit feature.
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
more information.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar and both outside mirrors to
a comfortable position.
information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall the mirror positions.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, or power mirror buttons.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating and mirror position can be
programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat while recalling
a memory position, the driver’s seat recall may stop
working. If this happens, press the appropriate control for
the area that is not recalling for two seconds, after the
obstruction is removed. Then try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not being recalled,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat and outside mirrors will move to the position
previously stored. You will hear a single beep.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back.
{ CAUTION:
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74
for more information.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Further programming for the memory seat feature can
be done using the DIC. You can select or cancel
the following:
• The automatic easy exit seat feature.
• The remote memory seat recall feature.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
{ CAUTION:
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining
seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located
on the outboard side of the seat.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
In vehicles with seats that have power reclining
seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located
on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat
information.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
release button, located on
the head restraint post on
the top of the seatback,
while you push the head
restraint down.
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering and Exiting the Third Row
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
{ CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat
to make sure it is locked into place.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
A. Seat Adjustment Handle.
B. Reclining Seatback Strap.
C. Sliding Seat Lever.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the third row:
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
To return the second row seat to its normal seating
position:
1. Remove objects on the floor behind the second row
seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor.
2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked in place.
3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the
seatback until it is locked into place.
4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushion until it is
locked in place.
5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to
make sure they are locked in place
1. Remove objects on the floor in front of or on the
second row seat, or in the seat tracks on the floor.
6. Check that the safety belt is not under the seat
cushion.
2. Move the front center console armrest completely
3. Place folding armrests in the upright position.
Reclining the Seatbacks
4. The safety belt must be unfastened and in the
stowed position.
To recline the seatback:
1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the reclining
seatback strap (B).
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) forward and move the
seatback forward. The seat cushion will fold, and
the entire seat will slide forward.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the strap to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding the Rear Seat
Third Row Seats
To fold the second row seats:
1. Remove anything on or under the seat.
{ CAUTION:
2. Place the armrest in the upright position, and
unfasten the safety belt.
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or pushed forward in the
entry position, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push and pull on
the seat to make sure it is locked into place.
3. Pull forward on the reclining seatback strap (B) and
push down on the seatback.
4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide the second
row seat rearward.
To return the seatback to the seating position, lift the
upper corner of the seatback and push it rearward until
it locks into place. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
The third row seats can be folded forward or removed.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Adjusting the Seats
To adjust the second row seats, pull outward on the
seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat forward or
rearward to the desired position. Release the handle
and push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback:
3. Pull up on the release
lever located on the
back of the seat.
1. Remove anything on or under the seat.
The headrest moves
forward automatically.
4. Push the seatback forward to lay flat.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch, using
a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, let the belt
retract into the headliner. Stow the mini-latch in
the holder located in the headliner.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to the seating position:
1. Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap
from the rear of the vehicle, or by pushing it into
place from inside the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
2. The headrest must be locked into place before
sitting in the seat.
{ CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the
mini-buckle. Do not let it twist.
5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latch is
secure.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Third Row Seats
Installing the Third Row Seats
1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is in
page 2-59.
1. Before installing the seat the seatback must be
folded forward. See “Folding the Seatback”
earlier in this section.
The seats must be placed in the proper locations
for the legs to attach correctly. The wider seat must
be installed on the driver side and the narrower
seat on the passenger side. Remove the bolts from
the holes in the floor before installing the seats.
2. Remove anything on or under the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the front
seat hooks are on the vehicle bars.
3. Fold the seatback down. See “Folding the Seatback”
earlier in this section.
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 Y (41 lb ft).
Pull up on the seat to make sure it is locked in place.
4. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on each
side of the seat.
4. Raise the seatback to its upright position. Push
and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked
into place.
5. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward, and
then pulling it out of the rear of the vehicle in one
motion.
5. Push the headrest up into position. Push and
pull on the headrest to make sure it is locked
into place.
6. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floor so
they do not get misplaced.
6. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the
mini-buckle. Do not let it twist.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash
and you are not wearing a safety belt, your
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it
and be seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up.
Always fasten your safety belt, and check that
your passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the buckle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable
safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see
reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section for instructions on use and
important safety information.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when
the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and
the vehicle.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull the stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten
the lap belt on smaller occupants.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, push
down on the button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder
belt away from the neck and head.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pushing the button to make sure
it has locked into position.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a guide for each outboard passenger position
in the second row seat and all passenger positions
in the third row. Here is how to install a comfort guide
to the safety belt:
driver’s side of the vehicle. To access the comfort
guide, you will first need to move the headrest
forward by pulling on the handle behind the
seatback. The comfort guide will now be
accessible.
Pull the comfort guide out
of its storage location and
then return the headrest
to its upright position.
Third Row Center
Position
Outboard Positions
The elastic cord on the comfort guide is adjustable.
You can make it longer or shorter by squeezing
both ends of the plastic adjuster.
1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from
its storage clip on the interior body.
For the third row center position, locate the comfort
guide which is located in a storage pocket, at
the top of the seat, under the headrest on the
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
location or on its storage clip.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
page 1-32 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same
safety belt. The safety belt can not properly
spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A safety belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with
the shoulder belt behind their back. A child
can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
The child might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
{ CAUTION:
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in
a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a
child will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is
also better to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Secure a
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury
during a crash, infants need complete support.
This is because an infant’s neck is not fully
developed and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles
into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not
remain low on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around the child’s
abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone could cause
serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk
of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint
properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s
safety belt or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that child restraint
and the instructions in this manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint. Secure the child properly
following the instructions that came with that
child restraint.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{ CAUTION:
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
CAUTION: (Continued)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be attached
using only the top tether and anchor.
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Second Row — 60/40
Bench
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
Third Row
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
second row anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover
or near the anchor.
Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar
The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of
the seatback for each seating position in the second row.
Open the cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
Third Row Seat
The third row has one top tether anchor located at the
bottom rear of the center seatback. This anchor should
be used for the center seating position only. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to
a single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the child restraint will not be able
to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Buckle any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has
one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the cover
to expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclined
position.
Make sure the second row bench seatbacks
are aligned at the same angle before placing
the child restraint on the seat. Make sure the
third row bench seatbacks are both upright
before placing the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in
a forward position.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
CAUTION: (Continued)
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger seated
directly behind the driver, and the third row
outboard passenger position.
{ CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger, and the third row outboard passenger
position.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover,
or in rear crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or in a
severe frontal impact. They are not designed to
inflate in rear crashes.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie
down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail
airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
passengers behind the driver and right front passenger,
and the third row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal
impact.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover
event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by
the direction of the roll.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the
occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more
evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard
seating positions in the first, second, and third rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-69 for more information.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be
page 3-41.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though the airbag(s) are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint in the right
front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled,
the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbags are active.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat
covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the
person to place the seatback in the fully upright position,
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect
that person and then enable the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-40 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-16.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-40 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a
new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If you have had a crash, do you need new safety belts
or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and children could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
feature, press / to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away. However, the
operating range may be less while the vehicle is running.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps
will flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn will chirp when Q is pressed
again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock
button. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
will unlock. The interior lamps will come on and stay on
for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the parking lamps will flash twice to
indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content
page 2-22.
With Remote Start
and Liftgate (Without
Remote Start or
Liftgate Similar)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lost transmitter will no longer work after the new
transmitters are re-coded. The vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. See
“Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
page 3-60 for instructions on how to match RKE
transmitters to your vehicle.
& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold for about one
second to open and close the liftgate. The taillamps will
flash and a chime will sound to indicate when the
liftgate is opening and closing.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound three times.
Battery Replacement
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
starts the engine from outside of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system
and heated seats, the heated seats will turn on
during colder outside temperatures and will shut off
when the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Heated Seats
on page 1-5 for more information.
The rear window defogger and heated mirrors, if your
vehicle has them, will turn on during colder outside
temperatures and will turn off when the key is turned to
ON/RUN.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps while the engine
is still running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for
the engine to continue to run. Remote start can
be extended one time.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to the ON/RUN position to drive
the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To manually shut off a remote start:
To start the vehicle:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote
start button until the turn signal lights flash. If you
cannot see the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the
remote start button for at least four seconds. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start
button again, after the vehicle has started, will shut
the vehicle off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be started using the remote start feature
two separate times between driving sequences. The
engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled
or disabled through the DIC if your vehicle has
DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
additional information. If your vehicle does not have
DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable
the remote start system.
The additional 10 minutes are considered a second
remote start.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key.
Remote Start Ready
After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be started using the remote start feature again.
If your vehicle does not have the remote start feature,
it will have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote start feature.
The vehicle cannot be started using the remote
start feature if the key is in the ignition, the hood is
not closed, or if there is an emission control system
malfunction.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote start feature to your vehicle.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote start
if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
The vehicle’s doors can be manually locked or unlocked
in the following ways:
• From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door.
• From the inside, use the lock control on the door.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Power Door Locks
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
page 3-74.
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and
press to lock the doors.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
programming.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Door Security Locks
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
door will unlock.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened
from the outside with the door unlocked. To return
the door to normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical
position.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgate
on page 2-14.
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must be in
PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the liftgate:
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
voltage, and the liftgate still will not function, your vehicle
should be taken to a dealership for service.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System in the index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
the power liftgate function.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Liftgate
CAUTION: (Continued)
Power Liftgate Operation
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
the power liftgate function.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle
must be in PARK (P) to use the power feature.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the
power liftgate is used.
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the liftgate:
{ CAUTION:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System in the index.
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is
no one in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you
could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always
check to make sure the area above and behind the
liftgate is clear before opening it.
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
The power liftgate can be power opened and closed
in the following ways:
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until
the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry
information.
• Pressing the liftgate
button on the center
console.
Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch
The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power
liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the button
a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that
operation.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated
manually.
Power Liftgate Button
on Center Console
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside
liftgate handle.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the
power function is in progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission
out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power
liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the
open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched
before you drive away.
the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the
liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power
cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you
must manually open or close the liftgate. The LIFTGATE
OPEN warning message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After
removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate
to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully
closed and latched position. The liftgate will now
resume normal power operation.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily,
then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service
before using the liftgate.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side
edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the
liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor,
the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully.
The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or
closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate
is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights
will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
To change the liftgate
to manual operation,
press the switch on
the center console
to the OFF position.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still
will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a
dealer/retailer for service.
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the
doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually
opened and closed.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always
close the liftgate before driving.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
Uplevel shown, base
similar
The driver’s door also has switches that control the
passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
or ON or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
page 2-27.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Windows
Programming the Power Windows
Windows that have the express-down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch.
Press the window switch fully and release it to activate
the express-down feature. The express mode can
be canceled at any time by briefly pressing, or pulling
the switch.
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or replaced, windows with the express-up
feature need to be reprogrammed for this feature to
work. To program the window:
1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or ON
positions, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close all doors. See
Express-Up Window
Windows that have the express-up feature allow the
windows to be raised all the way without holding the
switch up. Pull the switch up fully and release it to
activate the express-up feature. The express-up
mode can be canceled at any time by briefly
pressing, or pulling the switch.
2. Press and continue to hold the window switch until
the window is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close the
window. Continue to hold it briefly after the
window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has the express up
feature.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Sun Visors
The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the
sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
rod from side-to-side in this position also.
express-up feature. If an object is in the way of the
window as it is express-closing, or in certain weather
conditions like severe icing, the window will stop
and open to a factory preset position. The window
functions normally once the obstruction is removed.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch
is located with the power window switches on the
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the
lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come
on to show the lockout feature is on.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter when
the driver door is closed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
The security light will come on solid for
approximately 30 seconds and then go off. The
content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the
security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without using the key in the
driver’s door key cylinder or the RKE transmitter, a
ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and
the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the
ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked
by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go
off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will
sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to save
the battery power.
To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one of the
following:
• Press the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door
lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
The security light should come on and flash. When
the door is closed, the security light will stop
flashing and stay on solid and then go off after
approximately 30 seconds. The content theft
deterrent alarm is not armed until the security
light goes off.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will
not be activated until all doors are closed and the
security light goes off.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm
if the system has been armed.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or by placing
the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this
time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your speed at
55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles
(805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM message
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when
there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system.
additional information.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
( (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which you
can remove the key. This position locks the ignition and
transmission. If the steering wheel is locked, move it from
right to left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition,
you can turn it to four
different positions.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to
use things like the radio and the windshield wipers
while the engine is off. This position will also allow you
to turn off the engine.
R (ON/RUN): This is the position that the switch returns
to after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON/RUN when the engine is
running. But even when the engine is not running, you
can use ON/RUN to operate your electrical power
accessories, and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON/RUN for normal driving.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the
driver’s door is opened.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all the
doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and then back
to LOCK/OFF.
All these features will work when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to
10 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, it is routed around the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in?
The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting
When using the Electronic Range Select Mode a
number will display next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
See Electronic Range Select mode in this section for
more information.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brake first and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever, then push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park
on page 2-36.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located on
the console between the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-21.
• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerate slowly
or not shift gears when you go faster, and you
continue to drive your vehicle that way, you could
damage the transmission. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in LOW (L) when
you are driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and
DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed.
LOW (L): This position gives you access to gear
ranges. This provides more engine braking but lower
fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that the
transmission will be allowed to operate in. However,
your vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears
as required by various driving conditions. This means
that all gears below that number are available. For
example, when FOURTH (4) is shown next to the L,
FIRST (1) through FOURTH (4) gears are automatically
shifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift into FIFTH (5)
until the plus (+) button is used or you shift back
into DRIVE (D) mode.
Electronic Range Select Mode
Electronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows you to
choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle’s transmission
and the vehicle’s speed while driving down hill or towing
a trailer.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L).
2. Press the plus/minus
button located on the
shift lever, to increase
or decrease the
While in LOW (L), the transmission will prevent shifting
to a lower gear range if the engine speed is too high
for the gear range you are trying to select. You have a
brief period of time to slow the vehicle speed. If
vehicle speed is not reduced within the timeframe
allowed, the lower gear range attempted will not be
available. The highest possible gear that is allowed for
that engine speed will display next to the L in the
DIC. Try again to slow the vehicle speed and press the
minus (−) button to the desired lower gear range.
gear range available
based upon your
current driving
conditions and needs.
Automatic Engine Grade braking is not available when
the ERS is active. It is available in DRIVE (D) for
both normal and Tow/Haul mode. While using the ERS,
cruise control and the tow/haul mode can be used.
When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), the
transmission will shift to a pre-determined lower gear
range. The highest gear available for this pre-determined
range is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Engine Grade Braking
Tow/Haul Mode
Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving
on a downhill grade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed by
automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses
the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle.
This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases
control of the vehicle. The system constantly monitors
the vehicle’s speed, acceleration, throttle position,
and whether the brake pedal is being pressed, and
determines when to keep the current vehicle speed or to
slow down. The system will then automatically command
downshifts that reduces the vehicle’s speed, until the
brake pedal is no longer being pressed. This indicates
the desired vehicle speed has been reached.
Your vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode.
The button to turn it on or
off is located on instrument
panel under the climate
controls.
Push the button to turn it on, push it again to deactivate
the system. You can use this feature to assist when
towing or hauling a heavy load.
While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode,
grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to
select a range and limiting the highest gear available.
Grade braking is available for normal driving and in
Tow/Haul mode.
When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbol will
come on the instrument panel cluster. See Tow/Haul
more information.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal down
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you
feel the pedal release, then slowly pull your foot up
off the park brake pedal. If the parking brake is
not released when you begin to drive, the brake system
warning light will be on and a chime will sound
warning you that the parking brake is still on.
with your left foot.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-45.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with
the engine running. The vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
the vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
page 2-34 for more information.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Engine Exhaust
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the
shift lever button again.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Parking Over Things That Burn
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
{ CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{ CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
page 4-31.
Also see “If You Are Caught in a Blizzard”
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
There may be three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
about the services OnStar® provides.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Move the lever to the right for nighttime use
and to the left for daytime use.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
There may also be three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for
more information on the system and how to subscribe to
information on the services OnStar® provides.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time
the ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic
dimming feature off or back on, press the on/off button.
The indicator light on the mirror is lit when the
automatic dimming feature is on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the upper
right corner of the mirror face.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button to activate the compass
calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass
window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C or
CAL appears in the compass window, the compass may
need to be reset or calibrated.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone
number is displayed. The number shown is the
current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the
window on the mirror by pressing the on/off button.
Once you find your zone number, release the button.
After about four seconds, the mirror will return to the
compass display, and the new zone number will be
set. If C or CAL appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside power mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver door armrest.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror
performance.
Turn Signal Indicator
Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Press (A) to select the driver side mirror or (B) to select
the passenger side mirror. Press either (A) or (B)
again to deselect the mirror.
To adjust each mirror, press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to move the mirror in
the direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside
mirror to see a little of your vehicle, and the area
behind your vehicle. See Memory Seat and Mirrors
on page 1-6 for more information.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside power
foldaway mirrors, the
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect
the mirror.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
This mirror has the following features.
Automatic Dimming
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
page 2-39.
• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function. This
feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the
curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to its
original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), or the ignition is turned off or to
OFF/LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
information.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
Turn Signal Indicator
Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
Outside Heated Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up. While
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to
an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at
least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
The display is located in
the headliner and can be
seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
{ CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It
cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
English
8 ft
40 in
23 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light
on the rear display will flash.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
three seconds
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during warmer or humid
weather.
1 ft
0.3 m
The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the
vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will
be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved
into R (Reverse). This occurs under the following
conditions:
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read the entire section before using the system.
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up. See “Rear Vision Camera”
in the Index of the navigation manual.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in
the rear display. Once the attached object is
removed, URPA will return to normal operation.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment is
active.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being programmed.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button to be used to control the
garage door and the hand-held transmitter button.
Do not release the Universal Home Remote
button or the hand-held transmitter button until
Step 4 has been completed.
To program up to three devices:
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require substitution of Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step
will erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and the garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. There is no need to
continue programming Steps 6 through 8.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person assist with
the remaining steps.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the
door does not move, press and hold the same button
a third time for two seconds, and then release.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from the
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Using Universal Home Remote
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Storage Areas
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock
and unlock.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders, with removable liners, located
in front of the center console. There are cupholders
located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull
the armrest down. There are additional cupholders
located on each side of the third row seat and in each
door. There are cupholders located behind the center
console. To access, pull down on the handle.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Instrument Panel Storage
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
Your vehicle has an instrument panel storage area
located above the radio. To open the cover, press
the button.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
Second Row Center Console
The armrest on the center console can slide forwards
and backwards by holding up the lever located on
the front of it. To open the armrest storage area, press
the button located on the front of the armrest. There
is additional storage under the armrest. Move the
armrest all the way to the rear position. The tray can be
removed for additional storage.
Your vehicle may have a second row center console.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never open more than one of the three latches
at a time. This is to help avoid personal injury
and damage to the console.
Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it
will go before folding the second row console
forward. This will help prevent damage to the
consoles.
Assist Handles
To access the upper storage area, press the upper
button (2) and lift up. To access the lower storage area,
press the lower button (3) and lift up. The top of the
console can be folded forward for increased storage
area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (1) and
pull forward.
Your vehicle has assist handles above the rear and
front passenger windows. These are to be used when
getting out of your vehicle.
Floor Mats
There is a grommet in the driver side floor mat that
attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle to hold the
floor mat in place. To remove the floor mat, pull the
mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet
can be removed from the hook.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as
possible and against the side rails, making sure
to fasten it securely.
Luggage Carrier
{ CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-22.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that contains
two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the
armrest down from the rear seatback.
Convenience Net
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not standard on
this vehicle and must be purchased at your
dealer/retailer.
The vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear.
Store small loads as far forward as possible. The
net should not be used to store heavy loads.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Cover
Your vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can be used to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. To install the
cover, place the loops on each corner of the cover on
the four hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The cover
should be stored securely when not in use.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are four cargo tie-downs located in the rear
compartment of the vehicle, that can be used to secure
small loads.
Cargo Management System
There is an additional storage compartment on each side
of the system. To open, unlatch and lift the panel up.
Your vehicle has a cargo management system located
in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull the handle
toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up.
To remove the cargo management system:
1. Open the lid.
2. Remove the side panels and place inside the bin.
3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the
system by turning them counterclockwise.
4. Close the lid.
5. Pull up on the system by using the built in handles
and remove it from the vehicle.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-open/Express-close: From the closed
position, press and release the rear of the driver’s side
switch to express-open the sunroof. Press and
release the front of the driver’s side switch to
express-close the sunroof.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats,
and a rear sunroof over the second row seats. The rear
sunroof does not open. The switches to operate the
front sunroof and rear sunshade are located on
the headliner above the rearview mirror. The ignition
must be in ON or ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof.
The front sunshade must be opened and closed
manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the
sunshade.
Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if
you attempt to open or close it manually. Do
not manually open or close the rear sunshade.
To open the rear sunshade, located over the second
row seats, press and release the rear of the passenger’s
side switch. Press and release the front of the switch
to close the sunshade.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the
front of the driver’s side switch to vent the sunroof.
Press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch to
close the sunroof.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:
page 3-17.
Windshield Wipers. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
page 3-12.
Wheel and Telescopic Steering (If Equipped).
page 2-55.
Navigation/Radio System (If Equipped). See
page 3-15.
O. Center Console Shift Lever. See “Console Shift
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System (TCS) Disable Button (If Equipped).
Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-33. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped).
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel, below
the audio system.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work at all times. However,
when they are on, the turn signals will not work.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or
down and in or out. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
For vehicles with the
power tilt wheel control,
it is located on the left side
of the steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Push the control up or down and forward or rearward to
move the steering wheel.
Do not adjust the power tilt wheel control while driving.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
page 3-10.
on page 3-10.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-15.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
page 5-111.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
Turn Signal On Chime
If either one of the turn signals are left on and you have
drove more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
front of the vehicle.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on if
the high beam lamps
are turned on while the
ignition is on.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it. If you momentarily press and release the
lever, the turn signal will flash three times.
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a
turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward the rear of the vehicle.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield
Flash-to-Pass
With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,
pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch
to high-beam, to signal that you are going to pass.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit
breaker stop them until the motor cools.
If the headlamps are on, they will return to low-beam
when the lever is released.
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
J (Washer Fluid): Press the button located at the
end of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray
washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers clear the
windshield and either stop or return to the preset speed.
The ignition key must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN for this to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33 Windshield Washer Fluid.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle and then release. The wipers stop after one wipe.
Hold the band on 8 longer, for more wipe cycles.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
{ CAUTION:
6 (Delay): Adjusts the delay time. The delay between
wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to
the top of the lever.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
1 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
2 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer
page 3-64.
Under certain outside temperature conditions, steam
might flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of
time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a normal.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed on the
DIC when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings
Heated Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system, it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield. This feature only works
with the front wiper system.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate control system.
The button is located to
the left of the steering
column below the
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the rear wiper on and
off. The wiper speed cannot be changed.
instrument panel
brightness control knob.
Y (Wash): Press to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The window wiper will also come on. Release
the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on
the window. The rear wiper will run a few more cycles
after it is released. If the rear wiper function was already
on, prior to pressing the wash button, it stays on until
the wiper button is pressed again.
Press the heated washer fluid button to activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. This activation
begins four heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heated
wash/wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur,
depending on outside temperature. After the first
wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for
each of the remaining cycles. The system turns off
automatically after four wipe cycles or the button can be
pressed again to turn it off.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in
the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is
turned off.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise control on and off.
The indicator comes on when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
SET–: Press to set the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. But it
does not need to be reset.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or
greater, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and
stays there.
{ CAUTION:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
There are two ways to increase the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
When the brakes are applied the cruise control is
turned off.
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the lower speed desired is reached,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press the [ button.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
will slow down to the previously set cruise speed.
• Press the T button.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• License Plate Lamps
Exterior Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together
with the following lamps listed below. A warning chime
will sound if the driver’s door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.
• Parking Lamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off): Turns the automatic light control on or off.
- (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): Turns on the
fog lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
The delayed headlamps feature provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave the area around your
vehicle. The feature is activated when the headlamps
are on due to the automatic headlamps control
feature described previously in this section, and when
the ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then
remain on until the exterior lamps control is moved to
the parking lamps position or until the pre-selected
delayed headlamp lighting period has ended.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch in
the parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayed
headlamps cycle will not occur.
• The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The engine is running.
To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change
the time of delay, see DIC Vehicle Customization
When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel and cluster will also not be lit.
The headlamps automatically change from DRL to the
regular headlamps depending on the darkness of
the surroundings. The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps
control to the left of the steering wheel. Push the knob
in all the way until it extends out and then turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the lights. Push the knob back in when finished.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Do not cover the light sensor on top of the instrument
panel because it operates the DRL.
Fog Lamps
Courtesy Lamps
- (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with fog lamps,
the button is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually
turn these lamps on by fully turning the instrument panel
brightness control clockwise.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the
fog lamps to come on.
The reading lamps, located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror, can be turned on or off independent
of the automatic courtesy lamps, when the doors
are closed.
Press - to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light will
come on in the instrument panel cluster.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,
the fog lamps also go off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is
opened, unless the dome lamp override button is
pressed in.
For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and
stay on for a set time whenever the unlock symbol
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the
farthest position.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay on while it is open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds
after the door is closed. If the unlock symbol is pressed
and no door is opened, the lamps turn off after about
20 seconds.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.
With theater dimming, the lamps do not turn off at
the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim after
the delay time until they go out. The delay time is
canceled if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN or the
power door lock switch is pressed. The lamps will
dim right away.
The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain
off or come on automatically when a door is opened.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in
and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened.
Press the button again to return it to the extended
position so that the dome lamps come on when a door
is opened.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless
a door is opened.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed Exit Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Immediately after all the doors have been
closed, the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to
work until one of the following occurs:
The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination will
activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
• The doors are locked.
• An illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.
Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of the
instrument panel displays during the daylight while
the headlamps are on so that the displays are still able
to be seen.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up
or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that
is needed for very high electrical loads.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps,
reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are
accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on,
they automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition
is off. The lamps will not come back on again until
one of the following occurs:
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on before the ignition is off.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The vehicle may have four accessory power outlets.
They are located on the instrument panel below
the climate controls, inside the front center console
storage bin, at the rear of the center console, and in the
rear cargo area.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into
the outlet.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or
a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts
off the power supply and the indicator light turns off.
To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it back in
or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off and
page 2-27. The power restarts when equipment using
150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system
fault is not detected.
For vehicles with this power outlet, it can be used to
plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of
150 watts.
The power outlet is located
on the rear of the center
console.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in
use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN
and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged
into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of
the vehicle.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
defrost, defog, and ventilation of the vehicle.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets and half to the floor
outlets. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to
the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor
outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield,
side window outlets, and second row floor outlets.
In this mode, the system automatically selects
outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected when in
Floor Mode.
Manual Operation
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging
and Defrosting” later in this section.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the
front system off.
By positioning the right knob between two modes,
a combination of those two modes is selected.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature of the air flowing from the system.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. The indicator light on the
button turns on when this mode is selected.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button on the left
knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to
show that the air conditioning has been activated.
The air conditioning compressor does not operate
when outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C).
The indicator light flashes three times and turns off when
outside conditions affect air conditioning operation.
This is normal.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle.
It can be used to reduce the outside air and odors
entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also help cool
the air inside the vehicle more quickly once the
temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside
temperature.
For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.
2. Select the vent mode.
The recirculation mode can be turned off in vent and
bi-level modes by pressing the button again.
Recirculation mode automatically turns off when the
engine is turned off and must be re-selected when the
engine is turned on again.
3. Select the air conditioner.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost,
or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in
one of those modes, the indicator flashes three times and
turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on
when this mode is activated unless the outside air
temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). While in recirculation
mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
6. Close the windows after the hot air has escaped.
7. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the
outside temperature, select recirculation mode for
better cooling.
This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to
cool down. It also helps the system to operate more
efficiently.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry. To
prevent this from happening, after the inside of the
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is less than 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you might notice a small amount of water
dripping underneath the front center and right rear of
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs most of the air to the windshield and side window
vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the
system will automatically force outside air into your
vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from the windshield. Turn the right knob
clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. When you select this mode,
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can
be controlled with this system. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on the
right knob to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger stays on about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed, before turning off. The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button
again or by turning off the engine. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface
of the mirror when the rear window defog button is
pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
Different temperature settings can be selected for the
driver and all passengers.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Function
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control
Each time the temperature, mode, or fan control buttons
are pressed, the climate control display shows that
function along with the inside temperature setting.
The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument
panel cluster.
The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to
change the temperature of the air coming through
the system on the passenger side of the vehicle.
The temperature can be adjusted even if the system
is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always
flow through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Driver’s Side Temperature Control
The driver side temperature buttons are used to adjust
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the driver side. The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off. This is possible since
outside air will always flow through the system as
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
temperature. The passenger side display will show the
temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator.
When the passenger’s temperature setting is set
different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the
PASS button comes on and both the driver side
and passenger side temperature displays are shown.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
temperature. The driver side temperature display
will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
Automatic Operation
To find your comfort setting, start with a 73°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose
the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display shows the
current temperature(s) selected and AUTO is on the
display. The current delivery mode and fan speed
also display for approximately 5 seconds.
Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load and also
turns on your vehicle’s headlamps. For more information
on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet are automatically controlled.
The air conditioning compressor runs when the
outside temperature is over about 40°F (4°C).
The air inlet is normally set to outside air. If it is hot
outside, the air inlet can automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your
vehicle. The light comes on the recirculation
button while in recirculation.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
delays turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Press the fan switch to override this delay
and change the fan to a selected speed.
Manual Operation
The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually
adjusted.
D C (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols let you
manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow
to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease
fan speed.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate
control system. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is
directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button. Recirculation can only
be selected in vent or bi-level mode. The temperature
can also be adjusted using either temperature button.
If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperature
settings with the system off, the display comes on briefly
to show the settings and then turns off. Press the
on/off button or the up down arrows on the fan switch,
the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air conditioning
button to turn the system on when it is off.
Pressing a fan button while the system is off will turn
the system on. Pressing a fan button while in automatic
control places the fan under manual control. The fan
setting remains displayed, the word AUTO is no longer
displayed, and the AUTO button indicator light turns
off. The air delivery mode remains in automatic control.
y N z (Mode): Press the mode up and down
buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow
in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the
desired mode appears on the display. Pressing a mode
button while the system is off will change air delivery
mode without turning the system on. Pressing one
of these buttons while in automatic control to place the
mode under manual control.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air delivery mode setting remains displayed, the
word AUTO is no longer displayed, and the AUTO
button indicator light turns off.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light comes on.
H (Vent): This setting delivers air to the instrument
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle.
It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent
odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculation also
helps to quickly cool the warmer air inside your vehicle.
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed towards the windshield and side window outlets.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator
flashes three times and turns off. The air conditioning
compressor also comes on when this mode is activated.
While in recirculation mode the windows may fog
when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected
in floor mode.
Press the button again to turn off the recirculation
mode. It automatically turns off when the engine is
turned off and must be re-selected when the engine is
turned on again.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Air Conditioning
Sensors
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When air
conditioning is selected, an indicator light comes on to
show that the air conditioning has been activated.
The air conditioning compressor does not work when
outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). Pressing this
button when the outside temperature is too cool makes
the air conditioning indicator flash three times and
turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is not
available. If the air conditioning is on and the outside
temperature drops below a temperature which is
too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air
conditioning light turns off to show that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar
radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system
will not work properly.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water may drip underneath
your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the
air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield.
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog
mode. Use the defrost button to select the defrost mode.
The interior temperature sensor located on the
instrument panel to the right of the steering column,
measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. When this mode is selected,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the
vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clear fog from the rear seat side windows, select the
bi-level mode on the rear climate control system and
direct the headliner outlets toward the side windows.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs
most of the air to the windshield and side window vents
and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the system
automatically forces outside air into the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor runs
automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear
window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes after
the button is pressed, before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by
turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all
the windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
While in defrost mode, if the PASS button is pressed,
the PASS button indicator will flash three times to let you
know that the passenger climate control system
cannot be activated. If the passenger temperature
buttons are adjusted while in defrost mode, the driver
temperature indicator will change. The passenger
temperature will not be displayed.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Air Conditioning and
Heating System
Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to
change the direction of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel
near the outlet to control the amount of air flow or to
shut off the airflow completely.
If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls are
three knobs located on the rear of the center console.
The system can be controlled from the front controls
as well as the rear controls.
Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best
system performance.
To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the
front climate control system, an indicator will be
lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the
rear system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the
airflow in the rear will be approximately the same
direction, temperature, and fan speed as the front.
Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear system
and the indicator off.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that can
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turns on in
a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will
then be directed according to the settings of the rear
controls. The rear system can be turned off by pressing
the AUX button on the front climate control system
and the indicator will turn off. The system can be turned
back on, by adjusting any of the rear air conditioning
control knobs.
• Keep the path under all seats clear of objects to
help circulate the air inside the vehicle more
effectively.
• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes
with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn
on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel lets you choose the
direction of the air flow.
H (Vent): This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This setting directs the air through the
rear floor outlets under the third row seat, as well as the
headliner outlets. The flow can be divided between
headliner and floor outlets depending upon where the
knob is placed between the settings.
Fan Knob
6 (Floor): This setting directs the air through the floor
outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located
under the third row seats.
Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all
the way counterclockwise to turn the rear system off.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise for
warmer or cooler air.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
If your vehicle has this rear climate control system
there are rear seat audio controls located in the
center console.
The rear system can be controlled through the AUX
button on the front climate control panel. Press the
AUX button to turn the rear climate control system on
or off. An indicator light in the AUX button comes
on when the rear climate control system is on.
The direction, temperature, and speed of the airflow
for the rear of the vehicle will be the same as those
set for the front of the vehicle.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
Use the controls located in the rear of the front console,
to independently control the air flow for the rear of
the vehicle separately from that of the front of the
vehicle. To turn the system on, press any of the rear
air conditioning control buttons, except the C button.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel let you manually adjust the fan speed.
Press D to increase airflow and C to decrease airflow.
To turn the system off, press and hold the C button.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons
select the temperature of the air flowing into the rear
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and
press the − button for cooler air. The temperature settings
will display in 0-12 increments, going from the coolest (0)
to the warmest (12) setting.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages on
the vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
N (Mode): Press the mode button to manually change
the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired mode appears on the
display. Multiple presses cycles through the delivery
selections.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
H (Vent): This mode directs air through the headliner
outlets.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air through the floor
outlets as well as the headliner outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under the third row seats.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
6 (Floor): This mode directs air through the floor
outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located under
the third row seats.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime comes on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If your
vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new
one will be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
If this is not possible, it will be set at zero and a
label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old
mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
If the mileage is unknown, the label should then
indicate “previous mileage unknown”.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
Tachometer
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
several seconds and then flash for several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light indicates if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light comes on when
the vehicle is started, and
flashes for a few seconds.
The light should go out
when the system is ready.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is
started or comes on while driving, the airbag system
may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced
right away.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away.
United States
Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when the engine is started. If the light does not come on
then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with
the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on. See DIC Warnings
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
{ CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is or airbags are off.
{ CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
on this, including important safety information.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned, but the engine has
not started to run, as a
check to show you it
is working.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-40 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with
the charging system. A charging system message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) may also appear.
for more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an
extended period.
Voltmeter Gage
When the engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gage shows
the battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message
will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and/or
the charging system light will come on. See DIC
However, readings in either warning zone may indicate
a possible problem in the electrical system. Have
the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
When the engine is running, this gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The vehicle’s charging
system regulates voltage based on the state of charge
of the battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. This is
normal. Readings between the low and high warning
zones indicate the normal operating range.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake
is fully released. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
This warning light should
come on briefly when the
engine is started.
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there
may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system
and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® system
is active.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on and
stays on for an extended period of time when the system
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is
also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-23 for more information.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
Under normal driving conditions the gage will read
210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointer is near
260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
information.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then
is Solid
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle may have a
tire pressure light.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on solid for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-58 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly, as a check to show it is
working, when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If the
light does not come on, see your dealer/retailer.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system
assists your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
The following can prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
• If you just drove through a deep puddle of water,
your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help your vehicle pass
an inspection:
• If you recently changed brands of fuel, be sure to
fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You might notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration — these conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
• Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
• Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if you have recently replaced
the battery or if the battery has run down.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate
critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started
as a check to make sure
it works. If it does not,
the vehicle needs service.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION:
Security Light
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
This light flashes when
the security system is
activated.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
page 2-21.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information see DIC Warnings
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in the fuel tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out
of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
page 3-74 for the displays available.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located at
the top of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator
on the bottom line of the display. See Automatic
information.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
for more information.
The outside air temperature also displays on the DIC
when viewing the trip and fuel information. The outside
air temperature automatically appears in the top right
corner of the DIC display. If there is a problem with
the system that controls the temperature display,
the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this occurs,
have the vehicle serviced.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
on page 3-74 for more information.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the
trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer and
trip odometers.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, park assist on vehicles with this feature,
units, tire pressure readings, and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter programming.
DIC Buttons
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
timer, fuel used, and average speed.
The buttons are the set/reset, customization, vehicle
information, and trip/fuel buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following pages.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, press the vehicle information button
until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows
the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between ON or
OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on.
If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off.
The URPA system automatically turns back on after
each vehicle start. When the URPA system is turned off
and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC
will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as
a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC
information.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
page 5-13. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNITS
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
ODOMETER
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “UNITS” later in this section.
TRIP A and TRIP B
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the
last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time. Pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometers.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and
hold the set/reset button.
RANGE
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This
display shows the approximate number of remaining
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The display will show LOW if the
fuel level is low.
TIMER
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
AVG (Average) ECONOMY
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL USED
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
AVG (Average) SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays.
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this value.
To reset the value to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can
use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, trip odometers, oil life, park
assist menu for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter programming, units, and display
language.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip
odometer reset stem to view the following displays:
odometer and trip odometers.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
ODOMETER
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “UNITS” later in this section.
TRIP A or TRIP B
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A or
TRIP B displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since
the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while
the desired trip odometer is displayed.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
OIL LIFE
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
PARK ASSIST
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, press the trip odometer reset stem
until PARK ASSIST displays. This display allows
the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,
press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to select
between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will
be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be
turned off. The URPA system automatically turns back
on after each vehicle start. When the URPA system
is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P),
the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message
as a reminder that the system has been turned off.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-44
for more information.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See
“CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and
addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
UNITS
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to
select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the
vehicle information will then be displayed in the
unit of measurement selected.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
This display allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear. To select a
language:
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until DISPLAY
LANGUAGE displays.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
3. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
DIC Warnings and Messages
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays when there is a compact
spare tire on the vehicle, when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) warning light comes on, or when the rear
differential fluid is overheating. This message turns
off when the differential fluid cools.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
The AWD system is disabled until the compact spare
tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the warning message
is still on after putting on the full-size tire, you need to
reset the warning message. To reset the warning
message, turn the ignition off and then back on again
after 30 seconds. If the message stays on, see your
dealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
on page 5-56. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire pressure
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
more information.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays whenever the cruise control
information.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
page 5-25 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays and a continuous chime
sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage.
This message clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel
information.
HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUID
SYSTEM OFF
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
information.
This message displays when you manually turn off the
heated windshield washer fluid system or when the
system automatically turns off. See “Heated Windshield
more information. This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING
This message displays when you turn on the heated
windshield washer fluid system. See “Heated Windshield
more information.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD OPEN
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
PARK ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started
and shifted out of PARK (P), this message displays to
remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned
off. Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on,
page 2-44.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
the vehicle and check the liftgate. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
information.
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE AIR BAG
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
more information.
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays if there is a problem with this
system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
after 30 seconds and check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears
again when you begin driving, the AWD system
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
dealer/retailer for service.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on
in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a problem is detected with
the power steering system. When this message is
displayed, you may notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will
still be able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means there is a problem.
See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe
to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of
StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-48. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-59 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message
is displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer
more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
page 2-24 for more information.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist
steering system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-22 for more information.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
for more information. This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears
when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the
trip odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter,
and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open.
on page 2-5 for more information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this
feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature
is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME
PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
more information.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY EXIT SEAT
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
is removed from the ignition.
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
{ CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Setting the Clock
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and
DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the
time and date.
1. Press the clock button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
displayed on the radio screen until the time
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
(month and day) and DD/MM (day and month)
displays.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or RUN.
Press the power knob, located in the center of the
radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
3. Press the clock button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the
\ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse) button,
or turn the f knob, located on the upper right
side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player,
the radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock)
button to set the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option
displays, press the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow that is currently displayed on
the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and
2. Once the clock option displays, press the pushbutton
located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY displays.
24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day)
and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button, or
turn the tune knob, located on the upper right
side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with CD and DVD
Playing the Radio
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained
later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The Speed
Compensated Volume (SCV) feature automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
That way, the volume level should sound about
the same.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.).
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio Data System (RDS) feature is available for
use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the information
is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call letters display. In rare
cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. Press the pushbutton located below
the BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let
the display time out after approximately 10 seconds.
Each higher setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or
to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press to display additional
To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category)
can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under any one
of the labels and the information about that label displays.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where to
store the station.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages,
perform the following steps:
setting, or press either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward),
or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there
is static, decrease the treble.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
EQ (Equalization): Press to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for different types
of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, jazz,
and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass
or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting, or
press either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button
until the desired levels are obtained.
• Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
category list by pressing the s REV button or
the \ FWD button.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
Radios with CD and DVD differ when using fade in
5.1 Surround. The left front and right front speakers fade
rearward, leaving the center front speaker unaffected
until the last fade step, then all front speakers mute.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display the
favorites again.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service fee
is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
section for further detail.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
To insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
the Z button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of CDs and DVDs
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording,
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and
the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled.
Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in
their original cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD
player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio
faceplate or by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio
decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot
is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible with
most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD symbol
displays on the left side of the radio display. As each
new track starts to play, the track number displays.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds on the
CD have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on
the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the
right arrow to go to the next track.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from
a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can
be removed. If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back
into the player.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio
with CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX
button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc
partway into the slot. A RDM label displays.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM label displays.
To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD
remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing
entertainment.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack,
or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing the track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
for more information.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX
button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary
input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat
passengers are able to listen to playback from this source
through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
page 3-115 for more information.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
The radio has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to
play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using
an MP3” in the index.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
CD Messages
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other
messages when an error occurs:
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
Radios with a CD and DVD player displays:
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid
or unknown format.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a DVD
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
information.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
for more information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3
and WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system and to start the parental control feature.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or
remote control.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until you press
and hold for more than two seconds again, or until
the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock”
in the index, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD
or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
SEEK arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left SEEK arrow again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
to go to the next track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for
more information.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment
The Video Screen automatically turns on when
the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press this button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
r/ j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the
forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-115 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A
is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned
on by the rear seat occupant through the remote
control power button.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and show “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to
the softkey menu display, which requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey
or by the rear seat passenger using the remote
control.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the
forward arrow is showing on the display, the system is
in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the
display, the system is in playback mode.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA
system is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded
into the DVD player begins to play again. In case
loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be
completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
Ejecting a Disc
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time.
The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
turn it off.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. Connect an external audio device
such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
player, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary input
jack for use as another source for audio listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
distraction.
DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD
slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
for more information.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player.
Additional volume adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is not loud or
soft enough.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of
512 folders and files.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
Six-Disc CD Player)
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a large number of
files, folders, playlists or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio shows the MP3 label on
the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in
the order in which they were recorded to the disc.
MP3/WMA Format
Creating an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on
a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files
on one disc.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Change playlists by using the S c (previous) and
c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders can be played. If a
CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of
512 folders and files, the player accesses and navigates
up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum
are not accessible.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them,
the player advances to the next folder in the file
structure that contains compressed audio files.
The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the root
folder. The next and previous folder function does
not display on a CD-R or CD-RW disc that was recorded
without folders or playlists.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as the CD label. All
files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,
playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders
or files.
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files
are located under the root folder. The folder down and
up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then goes
to the root folder.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory
called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on
the disc.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc are played
in the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc partway into the slot
(Single CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Z EJECT: Press and hold this button for two seconds
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
to eject all discs, if one or more discs are loaded.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
File System and Naming
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files
on the CD.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or
CD-RW disc or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use
random, do one of the following:
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
• To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio can
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the
background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R or
CD-RW begins playing again.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. To listen to
MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton
located below either arrow button. The player goes
to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist
is displayed.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD
deck. On the CD deck, pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the
second line between the arrows and songs from the
current album begins to play. Once all songs from that
album are played, the player moves to the next
album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and
begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
MP3/WMA Format
To create an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on
a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW disc is treated
as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension as other file extensions might not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or
a combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a large number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the root
folder. The next and previous folder function does
not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded
without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of
the folder the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files
are located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then goes to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Order of Play
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc are played
in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display. The
new track name displays.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD
or CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc partway into either the
top or bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls
it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be removed. If the CD-R
or CD-RW disc is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW disc automatically pulls back
into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot
be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for
more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has
a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a
Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder
softkey only or the menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW disc in the player it stays in the player. When
the ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R or
CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
CD-R or CD-RW disc can be removed. If the CD-R
or CD-RW disc is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD-R or CD-RW disc automatically pulls back
into the player.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by
another artist, press the pushbutton located below either
arrow button. The disc goes to the next or previous
artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA
files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press
the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name displays on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begin to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files
from that album.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-115
for more information.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only).
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Driving
Navigation/Radio System
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might or might not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The operating range for
the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, and a remote control.
on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
When the radio is turned back on, Parental Control
is unlocked.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light does not come on, the batteries might need
to be replaced. Intermittent sound or static on the
headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
Headphones
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system
and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more than three minutes.
Moving too far forward or stepping out of the vehicle,
can cause the headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turns off after four hours
of continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones
are used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs,
MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio, any auxiliary source
connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the
vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones
have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a
volume control. Switch the headphones to Off when
not in use.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Headphones should be stored in the front floor console
and not in the front seat back pocket. Headphone
damage can occur when the second row seats are
folded forward.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not supplied) might be required to connect
the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
video screen power on. If the video screen is in the
DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button
on the remote control, switches the video screen
from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device.
The radio can listen to the audio of the connected
auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s)
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any
feature, do the following:
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system.
information.
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote
control.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
2. Use the remote control n ,q, p , o (navigation
arrows) and the r (enter) button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the display menu button again to remove the
setup menu from the screen.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote control.
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on; this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control P button or Z the disc
to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control O button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
page 3-86 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared receivers
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear
of the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in
extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu): Press to access the DVD menu.
The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD
menu. After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
n,q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press to select the choice that is
highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust the brightness,
screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display
the language menu.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active.
O (Power): Press to turn the video screen on and off.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or
fast forwarding a DVD. Press twice to return to the
beginning of the DVD.
P (Illumination): Press to turn the remote control
backlight on. The backlight automatically times out after
seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed
while the backlight is on.
v (Title): Press to return the DVD to the main menu
of the DVD. This function could vary for each disc.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start playing a DVD.
Press while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press again to
continue playing the DVD.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the DVD or
CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press
the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, play
may be slowed down by pressing the play/pause button
then pressing the [ (fast forward) button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the
radio, perform reverse slow play by pressing the play/
pause button and then pressing the fast forward button.
To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
e (Audio): Press to change audio tracks on DVDs that
have this feature when the DVD is playing. The format
and content of this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to
move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter. Press again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch the system between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the beginning
of the next chapter or track. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
d (Camera): Press to change camera angles on
DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the DVD
or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press
the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a DVD
audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ (Clear): Press within three seconds after entering a
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
numeric selection, to clear all numerical inputs.
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter
or track numbers greater than nine. Press this button
before entering the number.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back, on the remote control.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
3. Replace the battery cover.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio the vehicle has. The video screen might display
one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z EJECT button is pressed on
the radio.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources the front
seat passengers are not listening to (except on some
radios where dual control is allowed). For example,
rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it
through the headphones, while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is
off. The front audio system will display the headphone
icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from
the display when it is off.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen,
as damage could result.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If the vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard
on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press either the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the right seek arrow to
go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the left
seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track
or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played).
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the disc.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on
or off.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
Volume: Turn the knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right knob controls the
right headphones.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
x w (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to
go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could display.
When a CD/DVD is playing, press either arrow to go to
the next or previous track or chapter.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this
button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio
of the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle
has these features, does not mute. Press and release
this button again, to turn the sound on.
With THEFTLOCK activated, the radio does not operate
if stolen.
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to interact with the
OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button for longer than
one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar”
page 2-47 in this manual for more information.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
the radio.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨(Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio
station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press
the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek
arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD
player, if multiple discs are loaded.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Multi-Band Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
through tunnels could cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time. The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL
to indicate interference.
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the
vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the AM/FM
radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio
Service System, if the vehicle has these features.
Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for
clear radio reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof,
the performance of the radio system may be affected if
the sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of
the vehicle can interfere with the performance of
the radio system and, if the vehicle has this feature,
OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is not
obstructed.
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock Brake
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Your vehicle has the StabiliTrak system which combines
antilock brake, traction and stability control systems
and helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
Panic Brake Assist
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the
system working. This is normal and does not mean there
is a problem with your vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
Your vehicle has a Panic Brake Assist feature designed
to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the power brake system
under conditions where the driver has quickly and
forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The ESC hydraulic brake
control module increases brake pressure at each corner
of the vehicle until the Antilock Brake System (ABS)
activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal
movement during this time is normal and the driver
should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving
situation dictates. The Panic Brake Assist feature will
automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see these
conditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then
turn it back on again to reset the system. If any of these
messages still appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC), your vehicle should be taken in for service. For
more information on the DIC messages, see Driver
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when
the system is both on and
activated.
Traction control can be turned on by pressing and
releasing the traction control disable button if not
automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the traction control system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak light and the appropriate traction control off
message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the
driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction control
when traction control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, you may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned
off by pressing and releasing the traction control
disable button.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off traction control, only
the brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
page 3-12.
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer for service.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Steering
If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to
all four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is
like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever
or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is
fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Variable Effort Steering
When using a compact spare tire on your AWD
equipped vehicle, the AWD system automatically detects
the presence of the compact spare and the AWD is
disabled. To restore the AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the clutch in your AWD system,
replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
more information.
If your vehicle has this steering system, the system
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering
at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking,
yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
If you need to reduce speed when approaching a curve,
do it before you enter the curve, while the front wheels
are straight ahead.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 4-4. It is better to remove as much speed as
you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. Turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance is longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
of the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types of driving
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles
and deep-standing or flowing water.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{ CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-49.
• Turn off cruise control, if equipped.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
Windows clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Have up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
{ CAUTION:
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and the
vehicle in gear when going downhill.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth,
and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even with StabiliTrak®, slow
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you might want to turn
the traction control part of the StabiliTrak® System off,
such as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
page 4-21.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn the traction
control part of the StabiliTrak® System off. See
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning
before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does need
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on the vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-56.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Example Label
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your
vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The combined weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s
capacity weight.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To
find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on the vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid vehicle damage, a platform or flatbed trailer
should be used to transport this vehicle. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following in this section.
Dinghy Towing
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-16.
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy
towed from the front. These vehicles may also be
towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly
Towing” later in this section.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be dinghy
towed from the front. You can also tow these vehicles
by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels
off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed
using a dolly.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should be
run at the beginning of each day and at each RV
fuel stop for about five minutes. This will ensure proper
lubrication of transmission components. Re-install
the fuse to start the vehicle.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
you could damage the automatic transmission.
Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle.
To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels
on the ground:
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the underhood
fuse block.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
5. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition.
4. Release the parking brake.
6. To prevent your battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the 50 amp
BATT1 fuse from the underhood fuse block and
store in a safe location. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-115.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a
compact spare tire. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the transmission.
7. Release the parking brake.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles Only)
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with
two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
Towing a Trailer
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to LOW (L) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section.
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• And the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the button
again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument
panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn
off Tow/Haul every time it is started.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
Tow/Haul mode is to:
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is
most useful under the following driving conditions:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
• Increase the charging system voltage to assist in
recharging a battery installed in a trailer.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Press this button located
on the console to
enable/disable the
Tow/Haul mode.
The Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel will come on
to indicate that Tow/Haul mode has been selected.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer
weight for your vehicle.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Maximum
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Vehicle
*GCWR
Trailer Weight
Front-Wheel
Drive
**Front-Wheel
Drive
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
4,500 lbs
(2 041 kg)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
7,500 lbs
(3 402 kg)
9,500 lbs
(4 309 kg)
7,700 lbs
(3 493 kg)
All-Wheel Drive
4,500 lbs
9,700 lbs
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
**All-Wheel Drive
(2 041 kg)
(4 400 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your
vehicle should not be exceeded.
**Includes optional trailer towing package (V92)
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if
you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to
the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that
more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering
capacity more than the total of the additional weight.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
But let us say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may
add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and
400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle
now weighs:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only
way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-37. Dirt and water can, too.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
page 4-22. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Trailer Brakes
If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer
brakes. Because your vehicle has antilock brakes,
do not try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not work
well, or at all.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a good
deal longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Driving on Grades
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger and
load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer, your vehicle
will require more frequent maintenance due to the
additional load. Because of the added load of the trailer,
your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days,
when going up a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the
engine coolant temperature gage indicates overheating,
turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load,
pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
Parking on Hills
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
{ CAUTION:
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive
belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea
to review this information before you start your trip.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harness for towing a trailer.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the back-up lamp circuit is not functional, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer/retailer.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press
the Tow/Haul mode switch located on the center
console near the climate controls. This will boost the
vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery.
If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul mode, you can
turn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as a second way
to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-23.
• Black: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red/Black: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuse for this circuit is installed in the underhood
electrical center, but the wires are not connected.
They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a
qualified service center.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction
or damage not covered by warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-16.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of the Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines
for additional information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release. The door will pop open.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-48.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the
fuel cap is not properly installed.
{ CAUTION:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your
fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
under the instrument
panel on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the center of
the hood, and push the secondary hood release to
the right.
{ CAUTION:
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts
will automatically take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly.
Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until the
lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then allow the
hood to fall and latch into place under its own weight.
Check to make sure the hood is closed. If the hood does
not fully latch, gently push the hood down at the front and
center of the hood until it is completely latched.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-33.
on page 5-26.
on page 5-38.
Engine Oil
on page 5-115.
Checking Engine Oil
page 5-38.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View).
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
I
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your vehicle, the
engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system.
If your vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC)
buttons:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays.
If your vehicle does not have Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons:
3. Press and hold the set/reset button until 100% is
displayed. You will hear three chimes and the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this
display. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until
OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. You will hear
three chimes and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will go off.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose
of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer,
a service station, or a local recycling center for help.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
{ CAUTION:
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter (away from
vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift off the cover.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that may be found in the air
cleaner base.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
5. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover
and reconnect the electrical connector.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
The transmission fluid will not reach the end of
the dipstick unless the transmission is at operating
temperature. If you need to check the transmission fluid
level, please take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are
used in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle
could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but would
not get the overheat warning. The engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23.
{ CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost never have to add coolant at
the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
for more information on the location of the coolant
recovery tank.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD line or a little higher. When the engine is
warm, the level could be above the FULL COLD level.
The FULL COLD line is marked on the coolant
recovery tank.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
There is an engine coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-64.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine
is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
to a safe place in an emergency.
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage indicates an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended distances
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{ CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can cause injury. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered)
C. Engine Cooling Fans
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system, including
the coolant recovery tank pressure cap, is cool before
information.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat
warning continues, there is one more thing you can try.
You can add the proper mixture directly to the radiator,
but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
more information about the proper coolant mixture.
1. To remove the panel that covers the radiator cap,
detach fasteners and lift off panel.
2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a
hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck. Replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to
flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Be sure to secure it tightly.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
reservoir is located toward
the front of the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
2. Remove engine oil fill cap
3. Slide engine cover rearward and lift to remove
4. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
5. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
6. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
7. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
The fluid level should be somewhere between MAX
and MIN line on the dipstick in room temperature.
If the fluid is on or below MIN line, you should add
fluid close to MAX Line.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If operating
your vehicle in an area where the temperature may
fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, a
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, have
the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.
Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{ CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-38 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
information on the terminal locations.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If you
have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the batteries have enough water.
You do not need to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
9. Connect the other
end of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the
dead battery, but not
near engine parts
that move.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for
this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
Be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in
this section. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
Rear Drive Module
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
How to Check Lubricant
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{ CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{ CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle
has one.
3. Remove the two taillamp hex nut covers.
4. Remove the two hex nuts holding the taillamp
assembly in place.
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it.
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, make sure
the plastic pin on the taillamp assembly lines up
and is inserted correctly into the opening of
the vehicle.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Taillamp
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Install the new bulb.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the liftgate trim.
5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps
Bulb Number
194
3157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the lift gate trim opening.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be
used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold the wiper
arm in position and push the blade away from the
wiper arm.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly, do the following:
3. Replace the wiper blade.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the
rest position on the glass.
2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm
connector, and pull the wiper blade away from
the arm connector.
3. Install the new wiper blade, and make sure the
wiper blade locks into place.
For the proper size and type see Maintenance
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by
a sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
on page 5-72.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-56.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry
a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-56.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-22.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-64.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading Information Label”
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure
warning light and the DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information and details
about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation
page 3-64.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved
tire sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Your vehicle, when new, may have included a
factory-installed Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit.
This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire sealant.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire, if your vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS
malfunction light and DIC message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure,
do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated
on the tire’s sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on
the DIC display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-22.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
tread remaining.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-50 for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like
it did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
for information on proper tire rotation.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a
crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
Saturn specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and have them
properly installed by a Saturn certified
technician.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control, and stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
than the minimum required by law.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See
your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION: (Continued)
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a compact
This information shows you how to use your vehicle’s
tire changing equipment and how to change a flat
tire safely.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly.
is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should
ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what
to expect and what to do:
{ CAUTION:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only
for changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
If your vehicle has a factory installed tire sealant and
compressor kit, there is no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment and no place to store a tire.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire sealant and
compressor kit that is capable of temporarily sealing
a puncture up to a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area
of the tire. The kit inflates with liquid sealant and air.
The tire sealant and compressor kit can also be used
to inflate an underinflated tire. After the tire is inflated
to the recommended pressure, see Inflation - Tire
for five miles (8 km) to distribute the sealant in the
tire and seal the puncture. See “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal
and Inflate a Punctured Tire” later in this section.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
⁄4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a ⁄4 inch (6 mm)
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to read and follow all of the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions. The kit includes:
After temporarily sealing the tire, it is recommended to
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer as soon
as possible. If the sealant is removed within 100 miles
(161 km) of driving, it is easier to clean from the tire and
you are less likely to require a replacement tire.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
more information
2. Open the storage compartment door of the
convenience center that is nearest the liftgate.
A. Selector Switch
B. On/Off Button
C. Air Pressure Gage
D. Tire Sealant
Canister
E. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
F. Sealant/Air
Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
instructional label adhered to the sealant canister.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up to
1
⁄4
inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant
cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a
tire that has become unseated from the wheel.
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire.
After usage, the tire sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.
See “Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister” later
in this section.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement canisters are available
at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
3. The tire sealant and compressor kit is located on
the passenger side of the storage compartment.
4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
the storage compartment by grabbing the handle
of the bag and pull up.
Installation of Sealant Canister” later in this section.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
page 5-72.
2. Inspect the punctured tire.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture
up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire.
The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large
punctures, or a tire that has become unseated from
page 7-7.
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
Do not remove any objects that have penetrated
the tire.
3. Place the tire sealant and compressor kit on the
ground and unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) from
the side of the compressor.
A. Selector Switch
B. On/Off Button
C. Air Pressure Gage
D. Tire Sealant
Canister
E. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
F. Sealant/Air
Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read the inflator instructions, and inflate the
tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 35 psi (248 kPa).
page 2-27. The vehicle must be running while using
the air compressor.
The tire valve stem must be positioned between the
3 and 9 o’clock positions.
{ CAUTION:
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read the inflator instructions, and inflate the
tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Unwrap and plug the air compressor accessory
plug (E) into an accessory power outlet in the
page 3-21.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to the
sealant and air position.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Push the On/Off button (B).
11. Turn the compressor off by pushing the On/Off
switch (B).
The tire sealant and compressor kit will inject
sealant and air into the tire. Sealant may leak from
the puncture until the vehicle is driven and the
hole has sealed.
Steps 12 through 20 must be done immediately
after Step 11.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant
is distributed in the tire.
The pressure gage (C) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as they could be hot after usage.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (E) from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the top
of the unit. The recommended inflation pressure
can be found on the Tire and Loading Information
13. Disconnect the sealant/air hose (F) from the tire
valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Wrap the sealant/air hose (F) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate reading. The compressor may be turned
on and off until the correct pressure is reached.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug (E)
back into place.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 20 minutes, the vehicle should not
be driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air
compressor plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve.
more information.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove the
maximum speed label
from the sealant
{ CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in its original location.
canister (B).
18. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in your vehicle.
17. Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield
or to the face of the radio/clock.
19. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure,
refer to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant
to Inflate an Underinflated Tire (Not Punctured)”
later in this section.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot seal the tire. See Roadside Assistance
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
21. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire and
vehicle.
22. Dispose of the sealant canister (D) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with your local state codes and
practices.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer/retailer to have the tire
inspected and repaired or replaced.
Your tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory
adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of
its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,
balls, etc.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the valve stem by
turning clockwise.
5. Remove the air compressor accessory plug (E)
from the unit.
6. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (E) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Do not slam the door or close the window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
{ CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
A. Selector Switch
B. On/Off Button
C. Air Pressure Gage
D. Tire Sealant
Canister
E. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
F. Sealant/Air
Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose
page 2-27. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
page 5-72.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) from the bottom of the
air compressor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the
page 5-56.
{ CAUTION:
Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read the inflator instructions, and inflate the
tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 35 psi (248 kPa).
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may
be turned on and off until the correct pressure is
reached.
11. Turn off the air compressor by pushing the On/Off
button (B).
8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the air
only position.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as they could be hot after usage.
The tire sealant and compressor kit will inflate the
tire with air only.
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug and
wrap it back into place.
9. Push the On/Off button (B).
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
{ CAUTION:
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
1. Unwrap the sealant/air hose from the compressor.
2. Push the canister release button.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor
kit in its original location.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister. See your
dealer/retailer for the new canister.
5. Push the new canister into place.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valve
stem by turning it counterclockwise.
14. Wrap the air only hose (G) around the side of the
air compressor channel to stow it back in its
original location.
15. Return the equipment to its original storage location
of your vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding bracket.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom facing
toward you.
The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located
in the storage compartment on the driver side, at
the rear of the vehicle.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first.
1. Open the jack storage compartment by squeezing
down on the latch tab and pulling the cover off.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and lug
wrench (B).
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it
counterclockwise
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Open the storage compartment door of the
convenience center that is nearest the liftgate.
Removing the Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, in
page 5-100 for more information about the compact
spare.
2. Move the carpet cutout that is located through the
hole of the storage compartment.
3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning
the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
A. Rear Convenience
Center
B. Lug wrench
C. Storage
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Compact Spare Tire
F. Retainer
G. Hoist Shaft
Assembly
Compartment
Cap Hole
5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the cable.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back
up after removing the spare tire.
Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is
visible.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the
vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
page 5-93.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the lug wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or
feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue
with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire” listed
previously.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground,
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch could
be engaged.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the lug wrench. They will not come
off. Then, using the flat end of the lug wrench,
pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off.
Be careful; the edges may be sharp. Do not
try to remove the cover with your bare hands.
Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the
vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
wheel nut caps using the lug wrench.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove
them — using the lug wrench. For wheels with
a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key between
the lock nut and lug wrench.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and an
impact wrench is used to remove the wheel nuts,
the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged.
Do not use an impact wrench to remove the
wheel nuts if your vehicle has wheel locks.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. To identify the appropriate jacking location, find the
V–shaped locating notches in the molding.
Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, your vehicle could
be damaged. When raising your vehicle on a jack,
avoid contact with the rear axle control arms.
6. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turn
the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head
3 inches (7.6 cm).
5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare
tire near you.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Place the jack under the vehicle as identified in
Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the lug wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so that there is enough room for the
spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
9. Remove the spare tire heat shield by pulling the
rubber latch. Store the spare tire heat shield. See
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-96
for more information.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces,
{ CAUTION:
and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
11. Place the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface.
12. Put the nuts on by hand by turning the clockwise
until the wheel is held against the mounting surface.
Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel.
13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench to
the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as
soon as you can and have the nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-120 for wheel nut torque
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare
could be damaged.
specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
nut torque specification.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire
is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire
must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. See
instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
{ CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you
or on either side of you as you pull the jack
out from the under spare.
{ CAUTION:
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at
Step 3.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets
you know that the secondary latch has released and
the spare tire is balancing on the jack.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown
2. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack and raise the jack
at least 10 turns.
7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire.
5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the jack until
it lifts the secondary latch spring.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening when the spare tire has been completely
lowered.
10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging.
Have the hoist shaft assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire
using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired
or replaced.
8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare tire while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing the Spare Tire
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
{ CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
upwards, its secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened
when your vehicle was being driven, the tire
might contact a person or another vehicle,
causing injury and, of course, damage to itself
as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare
tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down.
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem down.
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield on the
compact spare tire.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the
wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
4. When the compact spare tire is almost in the stored
position, turn the tire so the valve is toward the rear
of the vehicle.
This position helps when checking the air pressure
in the compact spare tire.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrench until you
feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
Storing the Flat Tire
Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in the
underbody hoist system can expose it to heat
from the exhaust system. This can damage the
tire and underbody hoist system. Do not store the
full-size flat tire in the underbody hoist system.
1. Remove the cable package from the jack
storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back
of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the
valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the lug wrench to tighten the cable.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Hook the other end of
the cable onto the
outer portion of
the liftgate hinge (B).
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.
8. The metal tube should be centered at the striker.
9. Push the tube toward
the front of the vehicle.
4. Hook one end of the cable onto the outside portion
of the liftgate hinge opposite (B).
5. Pull the cable (A) through the center of the
wheel (D), then the door striker (E), and the spare
tire heat shield (C).
10. Close the liftgate and latch it properly.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on.
Storing the Tools
1. Attach the tool bag to the jack.
2. Make sure that the bottom of the jack is facing
toward you.
3. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it down on
the holding bracket.
4. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning it clockwise.
5. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the bottom
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place, insuring that the upper front
and rear tabs are in the opening and push the
cover closed. The center latch should be fully
engaged. This secures the cover in place.
Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers
until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you
replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall
the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand-tighten
them over the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will be automatically
disabled when you use the compact spare. To restore
the AWD and prevent excessive wear on the clutch
in your AWD, replace the compact spare tire with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
on your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it
states that it should not be used on plastic parts,
do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-104.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such
as ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that
contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels,
you could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Glass Cleaner
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Electrical System
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
High Voltage Devices and Wiring
{ CAUTION:
Exposure to high voltage can cause shock,
burns, and even death. The high voltage
systems in your vehicle can only be serviced
by technicians with special training.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
High voltage devices are identified by labels.
Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify
these devices. High voltage cable or wiring has
orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with,
cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily
borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The instrument panel fuse block is located under the
instrument panel on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Pull down on the cover to access the fuse block.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
FRT/WSW
SPARE
Usage
Front Windshield Wiper
Spare
HTD/SEAT
Front Heated Seats
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Illumination
Memory Seat Module
MSM
PWR/MIRRORS Power Mirrors
DR/LCK
Door Locks
AIRBAG
Airbag System
LT/TRN/SIG
REAR WIPER
Driver Side Turn Signal
Rear Window Wiper
Fuse Side
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
DRL 2**
INFOTAINMENT Infotainment System
Usage
PassKey Module, Body Control
Module
Not Used
PWR MOD
BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, Stoplamps
BCM
Body Control Module
Spare
HVAC
Climate Control System
Display
SPARE
CTSY
DISPLAY
RT/TRN/SIG
DRL*
Dome Lamps
Passenger Side Turn Signal
Daytime Running Lamps
Radio
INADV/
PWR/LED
Interior Lamps
RADIO
PDM
ONSTR/VENT Emissions
AMP Audio Amplifier
Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
LT/PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat Relay
RT/PWR/SEAT Passenger Side Power Seat Relay
PWR/WNDW
Power Windows Relay
PWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column Relay
L/GATE
LCK
Liftgate Relay
Power Lock Relay
REAR/WSW
Rear Window Washer Relay
Relay Side
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
UNLCK
DRL2
Power Unlock Relay
Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay
Driver Side Unlock Relay
Daytime Running Lamps Relay
Spare
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.
LT/UNLCK
DRL
SPARE
FRT/WSW
Front Windshield Washer Relay
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Left Parking Lamp
A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch
LT PRK
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Motor
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
ABS MTR
AFS
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
Airbag System
ODD COILS
PCM IGN
Odd Injector Coils
AIRBAG
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
PWR OUTLET Power Outlet
AWD
ECM
All-Wheel-Drive System
REAR
Rear Camera
CAMERA
Engine Control Module
Engine Control Module 1
RR APO
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Rear Climate Control System
ECM 1
RR HVAC
EMISSION 1 Antilock Brakes System 2
EMISSION 2 Emission 2
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
RT PRK
Right Parking Lamp
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HORN
Horn
RVC SNSR
SPARE
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
HTD MIR
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror
Spare
Spare
Spare
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
SPARE
SPARE
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
TCM
Usage
J-Case Fuses
ABS MTR
BATT 1
Usage
Spare
Spare
Spare
ABS Motor
Battery 1
BATT 2
Battery 2
Transmission Control Module
Transmission
BATT 3
Battery 3
TRANS
FAN 1
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps
FAN 2
TRLR BRK
Trailer Brake
HTD WASH
Heated Windshield Washer System
TRLR PRK
LAMP
HVAC BLWR Climate Control System Blower
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
Trailer Parking Lamps
TRLR PWR
WPR/WSW
Trailer Power
RR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
Sunroof, Sunshade
Starter
Windshield Wiper/Washer
S/ROOF/
SUNSHADE
STRTR
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
IGN
Ignition Main
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
CRNK
FAN 1
Switched Power
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Fog Lamps
PRK LAMP
PWR/TRN
RR DEFOG
Park Lamp
FAN 2
Powertrain
FAN 3
Rear Window Defogger
FOG LAMP
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
SPARE
Spare
HI BEAM
HID/LO BEAM
HORN
High-Beam Headlamps
TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Low-Beam Headlamps
WPR
Windshield Wiper
Horn
WPR HI
Windshield Wiper High Speed
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
12.2 qt
5.5 qt
22.0 gal
9.5 qt
11.6 L
5.2 L
83.3 L
9.0 L
140 lb ft
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6
7
Automatic
0.043 in (1.10 mm)
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-22.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure
to maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system might not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and at this time the system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (k).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-80.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and
release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats,
and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-48 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-105 for more information.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-20.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-56. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-63.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
{ CAUTION:
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-34.
{ CAUTION:
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Engine Oil
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-20.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
Washer
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Hood and
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Door Hinges
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
and Rear
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Folding Seat
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module) and
Transfer
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
SAE 75W-90
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Case (Power
Transfer Unit)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
15278634
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
—
89017524
PF48
41-107
12611882
Wiper Blades
Driver – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm)
Passenger – 20.8 inches (53.0 cm)
Rear – 11.6 inches (30.0 cm)
15254805
15254804
15276259
—
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance, in
the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
are resolved by the retailer’s sales or service
departments. If, for any reason, your ownership
experience falls below your expectations, we suggest
you take the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration or
title, on the upper driver side corner of the instrument
panel, or on your roadside assistance key card.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its
retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn
and its retailers offer the additional assistance of a
neutral party through our voluntary participation
in a mediation/arbitration program called Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost
to you, our customer.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case is generally heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you can
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the
final decision, should be completed in approximately
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it
is informal, quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
This is a resource for your Saturn ownership needs.
Specific vehicle information can be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gmcanada.com.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, write to:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to
Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum of $100.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,
propane and other alternative fuels are not
provided through this service.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada Only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Lock-Out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to
six per calendar year.
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada Only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you might qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night), and
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling for Assistance
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada Only): There could be
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your retailer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your retailer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are drivable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your retailer or Saturn Corporation.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Service Manuals
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com
to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn
retailer. You can ask to see them.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
retailer.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
saturn-publications.com to order online.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of
litigation through the discovery process; or, as required
by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may
also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made
available to others for research purposes, where a
need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-11
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-52
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-126
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
